Philips | 49PUT6801/56 | Owner's Manual | Philips 6800 series 4K، شاشة رفيعة، تلفزيون مشغّل بواسطة Android TV™‎ 49PUT6801/56 User manual

Philips 6800 series 4K، شاشة رفيعة، تلفزيون مشغّل بواسطة Android TV™‎ 49PUT6801/56 User manual
Register your product and get support at
6801 series
www.philips.com/welcome
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
43PUT6801
49PUT6801
55PUT6801
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 1.1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ - 1.2‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ - 1.3‬ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪- 2.1‬‬
‫‪- 2.2‬‬
‫‪- 2.3‬‬
‫‪- 2.4‬‬
‫‪- 2.5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ - 9‬ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫‪ - 4.1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ - 4.2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ - 11‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪- 11.1‬‬
‫‪- 11.2‬‬
‫‪- 11.3‬‬
‫‪- 11.4‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪- 12.1‬‬
‫‪- 12.2‬‬
‫‪- 12.3‬‬
‫‪- 12.4‬‬
‫‪- 12.5‬‬
‫‪- 12.6‬‬
‫‪- 12.7‬‬
‫‪- 12.8‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪ - 6.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ - 6.2‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻥّﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮ ‪6.3 - Y Pb Pr -‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪Scart - 6.4‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ - 6.5‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ - CI+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪6.6 - CAM‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪ - 6.7‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪ - 6.8‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪HTS -‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪ - 6.9‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪ - 6.10‬ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ray-Blu‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪ - 6.11‬ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ - 6.12‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ‪Bluetooth -‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ - 6.13‬ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ - 6.14‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪ - 6.15‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪ - 6.16‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ - 6.17‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ - 6.18‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ - 6.19‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ - 6.20‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪ - 6.21‬ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪TV Android‬‬
‫‪- 7.1‬‬
‫‪- 7.2‬‬
‫‪- 7.3‬‬
‫‪- 7.4‬‬
‫‪- 7.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ - 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ - 8.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪ - 13‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪- 13.1‬‬
‫‪- 13.2‬‬
‫‪- 13.3‬‬
‫‪- 13.4‬‬
‫‪- 13.5‬‬
‫‪- 13.6‬‬
‫‪- 13.7‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪ - 12‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ - 6‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪ - 10.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ - 10.2‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪ - 5.1‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ - 5.2‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪ - 5.3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ - 10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ - 9.1‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ - 9.2‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪- 3.1‬‬
‫‪- 3.2‬‬
‫‪- 3.3‬‬
‫‪- 3.4‬‬
‫‪- 3.5‬‬
‫‪- 3.6‬‬
‫‪- 8.2‬‬
‫‪- 8.3‬‬
‫‪- 8.4‬‬
‫‪- 8.5‬‬
‫‪- 8.6‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪NAS‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺟًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪ - 14‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪ - 14.1‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ - 14.2‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ - 14.3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪ - 15‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪ - 15.1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ - 15.2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ - 16‬ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫‪ Philips‬ﻣﻦ ‪16.1 - TV Remote App‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪Google Cast - 16.2‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪Airplay - 16.3‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪MHL - 16.4‬‬
‫‪ - 17‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ - 17.1‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ - 17.2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪ - 18‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ - 18.1‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ - 18.2‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪TV on Demand - 18.3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪ - 18.4‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫‪Netflix - 19‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ - 20‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ - 20.1‬ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪20.2 - HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪20.3 - Nettv‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬ﻭ ‪20.4 - Nettv‬‬
‫‪ - 21‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪- 21.1‬‬
‫‪- 21.2‬‬
‫‪- 21.3‬‬
‫‪- 21.4‬‬
‫‪- 21.5‬‬
‫‪- 21.6‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪ - 22‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ - 22.1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪ - 22.2‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ - 22.3‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪ - 22.4‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ - 22.5‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ - 22.6‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ - 22.7‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ - 22.8‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ - 22.9‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪ - 22.10‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ - 22.11‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪ - 23‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪- 23.1‬‬
‫‪- 23.2‬‬
‫‪- 23.3‬‬
‫‪- 23.4‬‬
‫‪- 23.5‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪ - 24‬ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪ - 24.1‬ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ - 24.2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫‪ - 25‬ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪ - 25.1‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ - 25.2‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫‪ - 26‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪MHL - 26.1‬‬
‫‪ - 26.2‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪HDMI - 26.3‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital Plus - 26.4‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫™ ‪26.5 - DTS Premium Sound‬‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪Microsoft - 26.6‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Alliance - 26.7‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪Kensington - 26.8‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪ - 26.9‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫‪ - 27‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓّﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴّﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1.1‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴّﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜّﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪ ‬ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪. ‬‬
‫‪1.2‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ TOP PICKS ‬ﻳﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TOP PICKS ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪًﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ( ﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪. OPTIONS‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1.3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻏﺎﻥٍ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻤ‪/‬ﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.OPTIONS‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪2.3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺪ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.www.philips.com‬‬
‫‪2.4‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧِﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ POWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪)VESA‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪VESA‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ‪. . .‬‬
‫‪PUT6801 • 43‬‬
‫‪M6 ،VESA MIS-F 200x200‬‬
‫‪PUT6801 • 49‬‬
‫‪M6 ،VESA MIS-F 400x200‬‬
‫‪PUT6801 • 55‬‬
‫‪M6 ،VESA MIS-F 400x200‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ،VESA‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ‪ IEC Coax 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ ‪.RF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣؤﻫﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision Europe B.V‬ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
7
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪3.1‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪/ OK‬ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK  - 2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/App‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪    - 3‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻠﻮّﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ambilight  - 2‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.Ambilight‬‬
‫‪OPTIONS  - 4‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪TOP PICKS  - 3‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪HOME  5‬‬‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪TV GUIDE  - 4‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCES  - 5‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT  - 7‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪SEARCH  - 8‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪LIST  - 9‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪  - 10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Netflix‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ، Android‬ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ‪Android TV‬ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ‪.Android TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 2‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android 4.3‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Android TV Remote Control‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫**ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Android TV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪّﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺸﻜّﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE - 4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 6‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻋﺒﱢﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻤّﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4 -‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 7‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TEXT - 8‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ‪androidtv /www.support.google.com‬‬
‫‪3.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Play Google‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﺼﺔ ‪ . Android TV‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ . Android TV‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Android TV‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ‪ ‬ﻛﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Android TV‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪ Android TV‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪3.3‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Android TV‬‬
‫*ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android 4.3‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Android TV Remote Control‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪Azerty‬ﻭ ‪Qwerty‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.*Azerty /Qwerty‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Android TV Remote Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪Azerty‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Azerty‬‬
‫‪Shift  - 2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ &‬‫‪ ; quot &Android TV Remote Control ;quot‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪.Play‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ *Android TV Remote Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Android‬‬
‫ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬‬‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Android TV‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ & ‪ **; quot &PhilipsTv ;quot‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪Fn‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Spacebar  - 4‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ‪OK‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪  - 6‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3.4‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ Azerty /Qwerty‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ،Cyrillic /Qwerty‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cyrillic‬ﻭ ‪Qwerty‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.*Cyrillic /Qwerty‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Cyrillic‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 2‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Qwerty‬‬
‫‪3.5‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Shift  - 3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪Fn‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Spacebar  - 5‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴة‪-‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪  - 6‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴّﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘَﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪,5 AAA-R03-1‬‬‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ +‬ﻭ‪ -‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 7‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ‪OK‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ Azerty /Qwerty‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ،Cyrillic /Qwerty‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺺ…‬
‫‪3.6‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻘﻼً ﻧﺼﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻭﺟّﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩًﺍ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HOME ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ‪ ‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ < ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺍﺀ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪4.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻀﻴء‬
‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .HOME ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻜﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻃﻼﻗًﺎ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪4.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻌﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪  ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺴﺘﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ ‪10‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪11 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪5.1‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪّﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﺻﺒﺎﺣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪8 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬‬‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬‬‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪8 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVB-C‬ﺃﻭ ‪DVB-T‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪T-DVB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪-DVB‬‬
‫‪ .( T‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ DVB-T‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪DVB-T2‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DVB-C‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ( ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻪ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ) ‪ )DVB-T‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ )‪-DVB-‬‬‫) ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DVB-C‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪DVB‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪7‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪًﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪8 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﺩًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ‪HC -‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺔ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ…‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫•ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫•ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫•ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖٍ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ‪ 8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪5.2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻭّﺩﻙ ﺑﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻭّﺩﻙ ﺑﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ . USB‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛًﺎ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪CAM -‬ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.Philips‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻًﺎ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ…‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﻧﺠﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪DVB‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐﻠّﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ *LIST ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬‫& ‪;quot‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ& ‪ .;quot‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ &‬
‫‪;quot‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﺎﺟﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻠﻤﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LIST ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠّﻖ ﺑﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻴ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5.3‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ…‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪  ‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪. ‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣؤﻟﻔًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻴّﻦ ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣؤﻟﻔًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺷﻴء‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ‬ﺃﻭ ‪. ‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺒﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺜ‪/‬ﻤﺸﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  < OPTIONS ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ…‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔ‪/‬ﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬‫ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ CAM‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ CAM‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑـ ‪. CAM‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.CAM..‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔ‪/‬ﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCES ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ) ‪ )CAM‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪CAM‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪2 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﻟﻄﻔﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪8 -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OK‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ‪ 8‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪  ‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪. ‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪، OPTIONS ‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ < ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳ‪/‬ﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)LIST ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ( ﺃﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OPTIONS ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻀﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪II-I‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻤّﻨﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺘَﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OPTIONS ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPTIONS‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ < ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪8 -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) LIST ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ( ﺃﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OPTIONS ‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻀﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬‫)ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬
‫ ‪6‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪8‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.BACK ‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ‪ /‬ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،TEXT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TEXT‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCE ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﻣّﺰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪T.O.P‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪..T.O.P‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCE ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) ‬ﻗﻠﺐ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﺃﻭ )ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCE ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪17‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﺼًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ…‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ‪..T.O.P‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ 2.5‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ 2.5‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﺎً ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫‪ 5.2‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪…2.5‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TEXT‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ < 2.5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪6.1‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪) HDCP 2.2‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ .Blu-ray‬ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫( ‪).DRM‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .Philips‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪) HDMI ARC‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀّﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.connectivityguide.philips.com‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ )‬
‫‪ ،( HTS‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ، HDMI ARC‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢّ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻼً‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ (ARC‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI MHL‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ، HDMI MHL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Android‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪MHL‬‬
‫‪).Mobile High-Definition Link ) 2.0‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﺍﺋﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪MHL‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Mobile High-Definition Link MHL‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ MHL‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.LLC ,MHL‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴّﺰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺪﻣﺞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗَﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛّﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ HDMI Ultra HD‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﻞّ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ‪.HDMI Ultra HD‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪HDMI CEC - EasyLink‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓّﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻳﺪﻣﺞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ) ‪ .( HD‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI DVI‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ‪ . HDCP -‬ﺇﻥ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ .Blu-ray‬ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ) ‪).DRM‬‬
‫‪6.3‬‬
‫ﻥّﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮ ‪Y Pb Pr -‬‬
‫‪ - Y Pb Pr‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮّﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ YPbPr‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Pr Pb Y‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪، EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink HDMI CEC‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪)YPbPr‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﻤﺮ( ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻴﻨ‪/‬ﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ، EasyLink‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪) CEC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ، HDMI CEC‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ EasyLink‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪EasyLink‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ‪Bravia Theatre Sync Aquos Link Anynet :‬‬
‫‪ . Viera Link Simplink Kuro Link‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪.EasyLink‬‬
‫‪6.4‬‬
‫‪Scart‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI CEC‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪DVI‬‬
‫‪SCART‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺯﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯًﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪DVI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ SCART‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ RGB CVBS‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪SCART‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ SCART‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪. DVI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ )ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴّﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.5‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ…‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCES ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ) ‪ )CAM‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ . CAM‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ .5.1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫‪HTS‬‬
‫‪)،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ )‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.7‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻠﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪)STB‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.6‬‬
‫‪ - CI+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪CAM‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪+CI‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪STB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪CI+‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪+.CI‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CI‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻛﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.CI‬ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CI‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ( ‪+‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪ (CAM -‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻝٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.8‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ‪HTS -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ARC HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷة؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI ARC‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‪،HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‬
‫‪ .(ARC‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ ( ARC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ )) ‪ (Toslink‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷة؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷة؛ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ARC HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻤّﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﻮّﺷًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ .DTS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI ARC‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ HDMI2‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI3‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‪ ، HDMI ARC‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI ARC‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗَﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪HDMI2‬ﻭ ‪HDMI3‬ﻭ ‪HDMI4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ .(ARC‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ ( ARC‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI ARC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪.ARC‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪6.12‬‬
‫‪6.9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ‪Bluetooth -‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ – Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ®‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ sound bar‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑـ ‪.Bluetooth LE‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰّﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Philips TV Remote App‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) Bluetooth LE‬ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻛﺤﺪّ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ، sound bar‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪sound bar‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠّﻖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪HDMI 4 MHL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪.HDMI MHL‬‬
‫‪6.10‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ray-Blu‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬ﺑـ & ‪;quot‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ&‬
‫‪ ; quot‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳُﻘﺼَﺪ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺄﺧّﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃّﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ EasyLink HDMI CEC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪، Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ < Bluetooth‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬‫ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺰّﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ…(‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.11‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،EasyLink CEC‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪6.14‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ، Bluetooth‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ < Bluetooth‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ‪Bluetooth‬ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪…Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪Y Pb Pr‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ < Bluetooth‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜّﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮّﻥ ) ‪) Y Pb Pr‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.13‬‬
‫ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮّﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻤﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ < ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪6.15‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺼﻐّﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺫﺭﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪USB‬ﻣﺼﻐّﺮ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2 -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺼﺮﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺛﺎﻥٍ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬ﻭﺿَﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐّﺮﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ . USB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪6.16‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺼﺮﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ، USB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ‪DVB‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪USB 2.0‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 250‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪…USB‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪USB‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 4‬ﺳﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴؤﺍﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪USB‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫• ‪ =Home‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫• ‪ =End‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫• ‪ =Page Up‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ‪ =Page Down‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫• ‪ = +‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• ‪ = -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫• * = ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪6.18‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.17‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺮّﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ (USB-HID‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‪ SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)EXIT ‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ( ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻃًﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪6.19‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ، USB‬ﺷﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ‪، SOURCES ‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫( ‪ .(PTT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪6.20‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬
‫• ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ = ‪OK‬‬
‫• ‪ =Backspace‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ = ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺼﻲ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣَﻴﻦ ‪ Spacebar +Ctrl‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ‪ =Tab + Shift Tab‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ )ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ( ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪AUDIO IN‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ‪Scart /‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ YPbPr‬ﺃﻭ ‪SCART‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ‪) CVBS‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪SCART‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.SCART‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6.21‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ…‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪TV Android‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.O‬‬
‫‪7.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ ، WPS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ، WEP‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺼﺔ ‪ Android TV‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Philips‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.WPS‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪WPS‬ﻭﻋُﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ‬‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟّﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PIN‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ، WEP‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫< ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤؤﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Dect‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪n /g /Wi-Fi 802.11b‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ )ﻟﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ‪SSID‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟّﻪ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 6‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟّﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧِﻞ ﻓﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ WEP -‬ﺃﻭ ‪WPA‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ .WPA2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪7‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DHCP‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) DHCP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DHCP‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒّﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ DNS 1‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪.DNS 2‬‬
‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪(WoWLAN) Fi-Wi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫( ‪.)WoWLAN‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪… WoWLAN‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.(WoWLAN ) Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Fi-Wi‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ…‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻭﺻّﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﻳﺜﻴﺮﻧﺖ**(‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 7 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪… Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ DHCP‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DHCP‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪DMR -‬‬
‫**ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ‪ ، EMC‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﺜﻴﺮﻧﺖ ‪FTP Cat. 5E‬ﻣﺪﺭّﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪…DMR‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪.DMR -‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬ﻭﻗﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Smart Screen‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ، Philips‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Wi-Fi Smart‬‬
‫‪ .Screen‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Wi-Fi Smart Screen..‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪.Wi-Fi Smart Screen < Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ، Google Play‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Google‬ﺗﻘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ‪+ .‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖٍ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻓﺮﻳﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SIGN IN‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ OK‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪OK‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺛﻢ ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ، Philips‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪MHEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ &‬
‫‪;quot‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪّﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ . Android‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ androidtv /www.support.google.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ < Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Android‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪7.3‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ,‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Apple OS X‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺧﻮﺍﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ‪ .Philips‬ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺧﺼﻴﺼًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻧًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪7.2‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓّﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺼﺔ ‪ Android TV‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ، Philips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Google Play YouTube‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪  < Philips‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ) ‪ .( accounts.google.com‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖٍ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﻋﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Android‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HOME ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ < Philips‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ…‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪. Philips‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Philips‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰّﻟﻬﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ .Google Play‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪Watch TV‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﻐّﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.Philips..‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HOME ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ < Philips‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺰّﻟﺖ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪7.4‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ‪androidtv /www.support.google.com‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪّﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ . Android‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ androidtv /www.support.google.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Android‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7.5‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ TV ;amp &Google Play Movies‬ﺃﻭ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Movies‬‬
‫& ‪TV ;amp‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Games‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳؤﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪.Google‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Google Play Music‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪8.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ، Google Play Music‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟـ ‪All‬‬
‫‪ ، Access‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ‪ .Google Play Music‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺿِﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ )ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Google Play Music..‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ .™ Google Play‬ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪ Google Play Music‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪.OK‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ‪4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪ ، Play‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪ Play‬ﻭﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪Google Play‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪androidtv /support.google.com‬‬
‫‪8.2‬‬
‫‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Google Play Games‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،TV ;amp &Movies Google Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎؤﻙ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯﺍﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺿِﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺿِﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ…‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Google Play Games‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻟﻠّﻌﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪Google Play Movies‬‬‫& ‪ TV ;amp‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . OK‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Google Play Game‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪ Google Play Games‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ‪4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ EXIT ‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺟ‪/‬ﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻩ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪Google Play Movies‬‬‫& ‪ TV ;amp‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ(‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ،TV ;amp &Movies‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ‪ ‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪Google Play‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪androidtv /support.google.com‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪Google Play‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪androidtv /support.google.com‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Play Google‬‬
‫‪ EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟ‪/‬ﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪8.4‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺿِﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google Play‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬
‫‪ 18‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻒ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺼﻨّﻒ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻔﺔ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.Philips‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ، Google Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻀﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻨ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play -‬ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ، Google Play‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻀﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻨ‪/‬ﺎﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻀﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google Play‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪Google Play‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ . Philips‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.Philips‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪androidtv /support.google.com‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ ‪ 18‬ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺩﻓﻊ ‪ -‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ( ‪ -‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪ .Google‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺧﺼﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ accounts.google.com‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ wallet.google.com‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬‫‪.Google‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻤﺤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬
‫‪8.3‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪ TV ;amp &Google Play Movies‬ﺃﻭ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫‪Games‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ…‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Movies‬‬
‫& ‪TV ;amp‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍؤﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪Google Play Games‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪...‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳؤﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪.Google‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ < ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 6‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪8‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪BACK‬‬
‫ ‪9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪8.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪-‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ < ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ( ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ < ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ، USB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،"...‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪< HOME ‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،HOME ‬ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ .PIN‬ﺳﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪8.5‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖٍ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖٍ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖٍ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔٍ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Android TV‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪9.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔّﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥّ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﻌَﺪّ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺜﻼً(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪ ‬ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HOME ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.EXIT ‬‬‫‪9.2‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪10.1‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪10.2‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬
‫‪11.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭؤﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪. Blu-ray‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪ 6 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SOURCES ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SOURCES ‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪ 6 -‬ﺣﺪﺩﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﺴﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪HDMI CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪11.4‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪11.2‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SOURCES ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OPTIONS ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPTIONS‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪HDMI CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪11.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،HDMI CEC‬ﻓﻴﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ…‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ…‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻳُﺴﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪12.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫‪12.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ…‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ < ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ…‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻮﻱ ‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮًﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫• ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ISF‬‬
‫• ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪HDR‬ﻫﻲ‪...‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDR‬ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HDR‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻣﺨﺼﺺﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪WP .‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ‪BL‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ، ISF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺨﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ISF‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺨﺒﺮﺍﺀ ‪. ISF‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ . ®ISF‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ ISF‬ﺍﻟﺤﻀﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.Ambilight‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪.ISF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﻓﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ…‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺣﺪّﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻏﺎﻣﻘﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫• ﻧﻘﺎﻭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺧﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ ISF‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ISF‬ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ‪ ،ISF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩَﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪40‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ…‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟـ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺨﺒﺮﺍﺀ ‪ ISF‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺃﻭﻻً ‪ISF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ISF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤةﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ < ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RGB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ultra Resolution‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،Ultra resolution‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ < ﺩﻗﺔ ‪.Ultra Resolution‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ < ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ < ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺿﻰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ، MPEG‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺘﻞ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺰﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫‪1 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ‪…MPEG‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ < ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.MPEG‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ– ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ– ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ– ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ– ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺻﻠﻲ – ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1:1‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟـ ‪HD‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ، Natural Motion‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪Natural Motion‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪Natural Motion‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺣﺮﻛﺔ < ‪.Natural Motion‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺃﺧﻴﺮًﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪12.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ…‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ< ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ – ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ…‬
‫• ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺳﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ < ﺻﻮﺕ…‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ…‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻞﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﻋﻮﺿًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ…‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪42‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Clear Sound‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،Clear Sound‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﻧﻪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ‪.Clear Sound‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً…‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‪Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺡ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭّﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪43‬‬
‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪12.4‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪ ‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﺭﻙ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳؤﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪. HDMI ARC‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﻧﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻠﻖّ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪EasyLink‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ (STB -‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺀ ‪EasyLink‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ …‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪44‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪12.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺑﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣؤﻗّﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ…‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪، USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪، USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.USB‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ < ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ ، USB‬ﺷﻐّﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Philips‬‬
‫‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪EasyLink‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪...‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ EasyLink‬ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Philips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪.EasyLink..‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ < EasyLink‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪.Easylink‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﻣﺸﻮﻫًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ :4:4/4:2:2UHD 4‬ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪:4:4 / UHD YCbCr 4‬‬
‫‪ 2:2:4‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ :2:0UHD 4‬ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪YCbCr‬‬
‫‪ 2:0:4‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ…‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪.Ultra HD‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،:4:4/4:2:2UHD 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :2:0UHD 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪.UHD‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻀﻊ‬‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI 2‬ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻣﺸﻮّﻫَﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ HDMI ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪12.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ < ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺮﺩ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺚ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀّﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ< ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ – ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀّﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ…‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺑﺪّﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TEXT‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓً ‪.888‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TEXT‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﺼًﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﺼًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.BACK ‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ /‬ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ…‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻠء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺺ ‪..T.O.P‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ 2.5‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،TEXT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TEXT‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﻣّﺰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻮﻋﺐ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻧﺺ ‪.T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،T.O.P‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪..T.O.P‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ < ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ 2.5‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﺎً ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫‪ 5.2‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪…2.5‬‬
‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪2.5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TEXT‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼ‪/‬ﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺺ ‪ < 2.5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ <ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 180‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪5‬‬‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻛﻞّ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣؤﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪12.7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﺘﻤَﺪّ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ) ‪ (UTC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐّﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻢّ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ < ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺃﻱّ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺚ ﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻴّﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻢّ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪّﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ < ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪48‬‬
‫‪12.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺼﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻀﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﻭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ(…‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ /‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ…‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰًﺍ ﻣؤﻟﻔًﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ < ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ؟‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺃﺩﺧِﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ ‪.8888‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪًﺍ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪6 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ(…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ < ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻄﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ( ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ < ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BACK ‬‬‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪13.1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫* ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪™ .Dropbox‬‬
‫‪13.4‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺟًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ USB ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ USB ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺟًﺎ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ USB ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺟًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OPTIONS ‬‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺟًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪SOURCES‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪ ‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OPTIONS ‬‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪، USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ . USB‬ﺳﺘؤﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪13.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪NAS‬‬
‫‪13.5‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) NAS‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ NAS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ، NAS‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪. NAS‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *INFO ‬ﺃﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.NAS‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ SimplyShare‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬‫‪13.3‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪ : -‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ*‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫‪50‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪:‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ ‪8‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫ ‪ 9‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪INFO ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪13.6‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪ : -‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *INFO ‬ﺃﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬‫ ‪5‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪6 -‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬‫‪ : ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬‫ ‪2‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬‫ ‪3‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ ‪4‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ ‪5‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫ ‪6‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ ‪7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ ‪ 8‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ INFO ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪13.7‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .TV GUIDE ‬ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪14.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) TV GUIDE ‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺰّﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﻀﻢّ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪)OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪14.2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ )ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻛﺤﺪٍ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺮﺩ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TV GUIDE ‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ < ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪) ‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﺢ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪّﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ…‬
‫‪ TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ْ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪OPTIONS‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪14.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TV GUIDE ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪52‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ*‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TV GUIDE ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠًﺎ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫* ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻞّ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞٍ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪.OPTIONS ‬‬
‫ ‪5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪7 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪15.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ…‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤؤﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ‪ DVB‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪)DRM‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺚ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﺪﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞٍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 45‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪...‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻣﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪9 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪّﺓ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ )‪ 8‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻛﺤﺪﱟ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ…‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TV GUIDE ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻵﻥﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎﺃﻭ ﻏﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪‬‬‫‪ BACK‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،OPTIONS ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . OK‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ‬‫‪) ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪EXIT‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪‬‬‫‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.INFO ‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.EXIT ‬‬‫‪15.2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ…‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪USB‬ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ، USB‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ…‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ( ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺚ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ﺍﻟـ ‪ 90‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖٍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪55‬‬
‫‪16.3‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫‪Airplay‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ AirPlay‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، Android TV‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩٍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫‪16.1‬‬
‫‪16.4‬‬
‫‪ Philips‬ﻣﻦ ‪TV Remote App‬‬
‫‪MHL‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪™ .MHL‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘًﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪ ، MHL‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ . MHL‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪، MHL‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗُﻌَﺪّ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪MHL‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ ، TV Remote App‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪TV Remote App‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،MHL‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ TV Remote App‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﻟـ ‪Android iOS‬ﻣﺠﺎﻧًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪MHL‬‬
‫‪16.2‬‬
‫‪Google Cast‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪MHL‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ ) ‪ HDMI‬ﺑـ ‪ ( Micro USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪MHL‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI 4 MHL‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪، Google Cast‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ . Google Cast‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ Google Cast‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.iOS Android‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Mobile High-Definition Link MHL‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ MHL‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.LLC ,MHL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪Google Cast‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Google Cast‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻞّ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ … Photowall Netflix Chrome YouTube‬ﺃﻭ ‪Big Web‬‬
‫‪ Quiz‬ﻟـ ‪ . Chromecast‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ‪cast /google.com‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪Google Play‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪androidtv /support.google.com‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘًﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.Google Cast‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.Google Cast‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫‪17.1‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google Play‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Philips‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪ ، Play‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜّﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬
‫‪ Play‬ﻭﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪.Google Play‬‬
‫‪17.2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺟ‪/‬ﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪..‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺷﻐّﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SOURCES ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ EXIT ‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺟ‪/‬ﺎﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪..‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪18.3‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪TV on Demand‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫‪18.1‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺗﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ & ‪;quot‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ& ‪ ;quot‬ﺃﻭ & ‪;quot‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ& ‪ ;quot‬ﺃﻭ & ‪;quot‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ& ‪ .;quot‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ & ‪;quot‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪...‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫• ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛّﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﻥّ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ &‬
‫‪;quot‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛّﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOP PICKS ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.TOP PICKS ‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪18.2‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪18.4‬‬
‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ‪ ‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟـ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎﺀً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ…‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ & ‪;quot‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ& ‪ ;quot‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOP PICKS ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪...‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOP PICKS ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺟﺮ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻟﻺﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻋﻄﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪5 -‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ‪) ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ‪) ‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣؤﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪Netflix‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ‪ Netflix‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Netflix‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ‪Netflix‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍً ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ‪ ، Netflix‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ . Netflix‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ‪Netflix‬ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪www.netflix.com‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪20.4‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪HDMI‬ﻭ ‪Nettv‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Nettv‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪Multi‬‬
‫‪ View‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪20.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *Multi View ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ…‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Nettv‬ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Multi View‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Multi View‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *Multi View ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ، Multi View‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ‬‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Multi View ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Multi View ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪20.2‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Multi View‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ*…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *Multi View ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ‬‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪، Multi view‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Multi View ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪20.3‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Nettv‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Multi View‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Nettv‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Nettv‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ*…‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ *Multi View ‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ‬‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪  ‬ﺃﻭ ‪  ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ :Multi View‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Nettv‬ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Multi View‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Multi View‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Multi View‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ Multi View ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺪّﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ 3 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪21.1‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﺎً ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪autorun.upg‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪21.2‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ…‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪Netflix ESN‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓّﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ…‬
‫‪21.3‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪6‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7 -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺷﻐّﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴ‪/‬ﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ٍﺑﺸﻜﻞ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪21.4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺫﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻً‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 500‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP Vision‬‬
‫‪ Europe B.V‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﻫﻨﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ…‬
‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺎﻟﺤًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻠﺘﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪. . .‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪3 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪< USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬
‫‪tpvision.com @open.source‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ‪ . OK‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪21.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ update.htm‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟًﺎ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮّﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.zip.‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ autorun.upg‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ README‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪TP Vision‬‬
‫‪.Netherlands B.V‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ TP Vision Netherlands B.V‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺎّﺇﻣ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ‪.،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GNU‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ )ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ ،( GPL‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GNU‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ )ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ ،(LGPL‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪62‬‬
(Basic, Digest, NTLM, Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer
resume, http proxy tunneling and more! The original
download site for this software is :
http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/COPYRIGHT AND
PERMISSION NOTICE
.‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
. ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ‬، TP Vision Netherlands B.V ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬،‫ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‬
TP Vision Netherlands ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬.‫ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬،‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﻱ‬. ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺎًﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳؤﺛﺮ ﻻ‬B.V
TP Vision Netherlands ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
. ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬. ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﻧﻪ‬B.V
.‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻚ‬
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg,
daniel@haxx.se.All rights reserved. Permission to use,
copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose
with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the
above copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USEOR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written authorization of the
copyright holder.
Open Source
Android (5.1.0)
This TV contains the Android Lollipop Software. Android
is a Linux-based operating system designed primarily for
touch screen mobile devices such as smartphones and
tablet computers. This software will also be reused in
TPVision Android based TV's. The original download site
for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of the
Apache license version 2, which can be found below.
Android APACHE License Version 2
(http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html)
Toolbox (N/A)
The original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of the
Apache license version 2, which can be found below.
Android APACHE License Version 2
(http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html)
libfreetype (2.4.2)
FreeType is a software development library, available in
source and binary forms, used to render text on to
bitmaps and provides support for other font-related
operations
linux kernel (3.10.27)
The original download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libfreetype-androidFreetype
License
This TV contains the Linux Kernel. The original download
site for this software is : http://www.kernel.org/.This piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found
below. Additionally, following exception applies : "NOTE!
This copyright does *not* cover user programs that use
kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely
considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not* fall
under the heading of "derived work". Also note that the
GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the
linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and others who
actually wrote it. Also note that the only valid version of
the GPL as far as the kernel is concerned is _this_
particular version of the license (ie v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or
whatever), unless explicitly otherwise stated. Linus
Torvalds"
libjpeg (8a)
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This
software is based in part on the work of the Independent
JPEG Group.
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this software, its
quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a
particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and
you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and
accuracy. This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998,
Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as
specified below. Permission is hereby granted to use,
copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions
thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these
conditions:(1) If any part of the source code for this
software is distributed, then this README file must be
included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the
original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.(2) If only executable code is distributed,
then the accompanying documentation must state that
libcurl (7.21.7)
libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL transfer
library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS, Gopher,
HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS, POP3,
POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP, SMTPS,
Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL certificates, HTTP
POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading, HTTP form based
upload, proxies, cookies, user+password authentication
63
For generating CRC32 values required for composing
PAT, PMT, EIT sections
"this software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission for use of this
software is granted only if the user accepts full
responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the
authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or
based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library.
If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name in advertising or
publicity relating to this software or products derived from
it. This software may be referred to only as "the
Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically
permit and encourage the use of this software as the
basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty
or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
The original download site for this software is : https://gith
ub.com/a4tunado/dvbsnoop/blob/master/src/misc/crc32.c
GPL v2 http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html
ezxml (0.8.6)
ezXML is a C library for parsing XML documents.
The original download site for this software is :
http://ezxml.sourceforge.net.Copyright 2004, 2005 Aaron
Voisine. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the MIT license, which can be
found below.
gSoap (2.7.15)
The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++
software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web
services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data
bindings. Part of the software embedded in this product is
gSOAP software. Portions created by gSOAP are
Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van Engelen, Genivia inc.
All Rights Reserved. THE SOFTWARE IN THIS
PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
libpng (1.4.1)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
-reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a platform
independent library that contains C functions for handling
PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is
extensible. The original download site for this software is
: https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng license
openssl (1.0.1j)
OpenSSL is an open-source implementation of the SSL
and TLS protocols. The core library, written in the C
programming language, implements the basic
cryptographic functions and provides various utility
functions. The original download site for this software is :
http://openssl.org/OpenSSL license
Zlib compression library (1.2.7)
zlib is a general purpose data compression library. All the
code is thread safe. The data format used by the zlib
library is described by RFCs (Request for Comments)
1950 to 1952 in the files http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1950
(zlib format), rfc1951 (deflate format) and rfc1952 (gzip
format) Developed by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler(C)
1995-2012 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software
is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for
any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for
any purpose, including commercial applications, and to
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source
versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not
be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This
notice may not be removed or altered from any source
distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup@gzip.org
madler@alumni.caltech.edu
restlet (2.1.7)
Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source
REST framework for the Java platform. Rest let is
suitable for both server and client Web applications. It
supports major Internet transport, data format, and
service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS,
SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original
download site for this software is : http://restlet.orgThis
piece of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License version 2.
Opera Web Browser (SDK 3.5)
This TV contains Opera Browser Software.
dlmalloc (2.7.2)
dvbsnoop (1.2)
Opera uses Doug Lea's memory allocator
dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program.
64
http://www.freetype.org/freetype2/index.htmlFreetype
License
The original download site for this software is :
http://gee.cs.oswego.edu/dl/html/malloc.html
HKSCS (2008)
double-conversion
Opera uses HKSCS: The Government of the Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region HKSCS mappingsThe
original download site for this software is :
http://www.ogcio.gov.hkBefore downloading the Software
or Document provided on this Web page, you should
read the following terms (Terms of Use). By downloading
the Software and Document, you are deemed to agree to
these terms.1. The Government of the Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region (HKSARG) has the right to
amend or vary the terms under this Terms of Use from
time to time at its sole discretion.2. By using the Software
and Document, you irrevocably agree that the HKSARG
may from time to time vary this Terms of Use without
further notice to you and you also irrevocably agree to be
bound by the most updated version of the Terms of
Use.3. You have the sole responsibility of obtaining the
most updated version of the Terms of Use which is
available in the "Digital 21" Web site (http://www.ogcio.go
v.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/terms.htm).4.
By accepting this Terms of Use, HKSARG shall grant you
a non-exclusive license to use the Software and
Document for any purpose, subject to clause 5 below.5.
You are not allowed to make copies of the Software and
Document except it is incidental to and necessary for the
normal use of the Software. You are not allowed to adapt
or modify the Software and Document or to distribute,
sell, rent, or make available to the public the Software
and Document, including copies or an adaptation of
them.6. The Software and Document are protected by
copyright. The licensors of the Government of Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region are the owners of all
copyright works in the Software and Document. All rights
reserved.7. You understand and agree that use of the
Software and Document are at your sole risk, that any
material and/or data downloaded or otherwise obtained in
relation to the Software and Document is at your
discretion and risk and that you will be solely responsible
for any damage caused to your computer system or loss
of data or any other loss that results from the download
and use of the Software and Document in any manner
whatsoever.8. In relation to the Software and Document,
HKSARG hereby disclaims all warranties and conditions,
including all implied warranties and conditions of
-merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non
infringement.9. HKSARG will not be liable for any direct,
indirect, incidental, special or consequential loss of any
kind resulting from the use of or the inability to use the
Software and Document even if HKSARG has been
advised of the possibility of such loss.10. You agree not
to sue HKSARG and agree to indemnify, defend and hold
harmless HKSARG, its officers and employees from any
and all third party claims, liability, damages and/or costs
(including, but not limited to, legal fees) arising from your
use of the Software and Document, your violation of the
Terms of Use or infringement of any intellectual property
or other right of any person or entity.11. The Terms of
Opera uses double-conversion library by Florian Loitsch,
faster double : string conversions (dtoa and strtod).The
original download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/double-conversionCopyright
2006-2011, the V8 project authors. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions
in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHTOWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
EMX (0.9c)
Opera uses EMX, which is an OS/2 port of the gcc suite.
Opera uses modified versions of the sprintf and sscanf
methods from this C library.* The emx libraries are not
distributed under the GPL. Linking an * application with
the emx libraries does not cause the executable * to be
covered by the GNU General Public License. You are
allowed * to change and copy the emx library sources if
you keep the copyright * message intact. If you improve
the emx libraries, please send your * enhancements to
the emx author (you should copyright your *
enhancements similar to the existing emx libraries).
freetype (2.4.8)
Opera uses freetype FreeType 2 is a software-font
engine that is designed to be small, efficient, highly
customizable and portable, while capable of producing
high-quality output (glyph images).The original download
site for this software is :
65
decode WebP images. The turbo servers will eventually
re-decode images to WebP. The original download site
for this software is :
https://developers.google.com/speed/webp/?csw=1 https:
//chromium.googlesource.com/webm/libwebp/Additional
IP Rights Grant (Patents)"This implementation" means
the copyrightable works distributed by Google as part of
the WebM Project.Google hereby grants to you a
-perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty
free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section)patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import, transfer, and otherwise run, modify and propagate
the contents of this implementation of VP8, where such
license applies only to those patent claims, both currently
owned by Google and acquired in the future, licensable
by Google that are necessarily infringed by this
implementation of VP8. This grant does not include
claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of
further modification of this implementation. If you or your
agent or exclusive licensee institute or order or agree to
the institution of patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that this implementation of VP8 or any code
incorporated within this implementation of VP8
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, or
inducement of patent infringement, then any patent rights
granted to you under this License for this implementation
of VP8shall terminate as of the date such litigation is
filed.
Use will be governed by and construed in accordance
with the laws of Hong Kong.12. Any waiver of any
provision of the Terms of Use will be effective only if in
writing and signed by HKSARG or its representative.13. If
for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any
provision or portion of the Terms of Use to be
unenforceable, the remainder of the Terms of Use will
continue in full force and effect.14. The Terms of Use
constitute the entire agreement between the parties with
respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes and
replaces all prior or contemporaneous understandings or
agreements, written or oral, regarding such subject
matter.15.In addition to the licence granted in Clause 4,
HKSARG hereby grants you a non-exclusive limited
licence to reproduce and distribute the Software and
Document with the following conditions:(i) not for financial
gain unless it is incidental;(ii) reproduction and
distribution of the Software and Document in complete
and unmodified form; and(iii) when you distribute the
Software and Document, you agree to attach the Terms
of Use and a statement that the latest version of the
Terms of Use is available from the "Office of the
Government Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://w
ww.ogcio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t
erms.htm).
IANA (Dec 30 2013)
Opera uses Internet Assigned Numbers Authority:
Character encoding tag names and numbers. The
original download site for this software is :
https://www.iana.org
FaceBook SDK (3.0.1)
This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK for
Android is the easiest way to integrate your Android app
with Facebook's platform. The SDK provides support for
Login with Facebook authentication, reading and writing
to Facebook APIs and support for UI elements such as
pickers and dialogs. The original download site for this
software is :
https://developer.facebook.com/docs/androidThis piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License version 2.
ICU (3)
Opera uses ICU : International Components for Unicode:
Mapping table for GB18030The original download site for
-this software is : http://site.icu-project.org/http://source.icu
project.org/repos/icu/icu/trunk/license.html
MozTW (1.0)
Opera uses MoxTW : MozTW project: Big5-2003
mapping tables. The original download site for this
software is : https://moztw.orgThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of CCPL
iptables (1.4.7)
iptables is a user space application program that allows a
system administrator to configure the tables provided by
the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as different
Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it stores.
Different kernel modules and programs are currently
used for different protocols; iptables applies to IPv4The
original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.comThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2.
NPAPI (0.27)
Opera uses NPAPI : Netscape 4 Plugin API: npapi.h,
npfunctions.h, npruntime.h and nptypes.h. Distributed as
part of the Netscape 4 Plugin SDK.The original download
site for this software is : wiki.mozilla.orgThis piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of mozilla licencse as described below.
Unicode (4.0)
Opera uses Unicode : Data from the Unicode character
database. The original download site for this software is :
www.unicode.orghttp://www.unicode.org/copyright.html
libyuv (814)
libyuv is an open source project that includes YUV
conversion and scaling functionality. The original
download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/libyuvThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions BSD.
Webp (0.2.0)
Opera uses Webp : libwebp is a library for decoding
images in the WebP format. Products may use it to
66
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSSOF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUTOF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OFSUCH DAMAGE.
ffmpeg (2.1.3)
-This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, cross
platform solution to record, convert and stream audio and
video. The original download site for this software is :
http://ffmpeg.orgThis piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license,
which can be found below.
u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based on
ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be installed
in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test the
hardware or to download and run application code
EXPAT (2.1.0)
EXPAT is a XML Parser. The original download site for
this software is : http://expat.sourceforge.netCopyright (c)
1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
This piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found
below.
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat
maintainers. Permission is hereby granted, free of
charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished
to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above
copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
live555 (0.82)
Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.live555.comThis piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL
v2.1 license, which can be found below.
Bluetooth Stack (Bluedroid)
This TV uses Bluetooth stack. The original download site
for this software is :This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Android
Apache License Version 2.
EXIF (NA)
Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.sentex.net/~mwandel/jhead/Portions of this
source code are in the public domain
Copyright (c) 2008, The Android Open Source Project
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met: *
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. * Neither the name of The Android Open
Source Project nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THECOPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
neven face recognition library (NA)
This TV uses neven face recognition library which is used
for face recognitionThis piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Android
Apache License version 2.
Unicode (4.8.1.1)
This TV uses Unicode which specifies the representation
of text
-The original download site for this software is : http://icu
project.orgICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1995-2008 International Business Machines
Corporation and others
All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of
charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including without
67
Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text,
Geometries, and Images. The original download site for
this software is : http://code.google.com/p/skia/Copyright
(c) 2011 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution
and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary
form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHTOWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the Software
and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN
THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE
OF THIS SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used
in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder. All trademarks and
registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property
of their respective owners.
IPRoute2 (NA)
IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP, Networking and Traffic
control. The original download site for this software is : htt
p://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/netw
orking/iproute2This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of GPL V2.
mtpd (NA)
Sonic Audio Synthesis library (NA)
mtpd is used for VPN Network. The original download
site for this software is : http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/This
piece of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of Apache License version 2.0.
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.sonivoxmi.com/This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
MDNS Responder (NA)
Sqlite (3071100)
MDNS Responder. The Mdns Responder project is a
component of Bonjour, Apple's ease-of-use IP networking
initiative. The original download site for this software is : h
ttp://www.opensource.apple.com/tarballs/mDNSRespond
er/This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of Apache License version 2.0.
The original download site for this software is :
www.sqlite.org.This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of Apache License
version 2.0.
Nuance Speech Recognition engine (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
NFC (NA)
NFC Semiconductor's NFC Library. Near Field
Communication (NFC) is a set of short-range wireless
technologies, typically requiring a distance of 4cm or less
to initiate a connection. NFC allows you to share small
-payloads of data between an NFC tag and an Android
powered device, or between two Android-powered
devices. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of Apache License version 2.0.
C++Standard Template Library library (5)
This TV uses Implementation of the C++ Standard
Template Library. The original download site for this
software is : http://stlport.sourceforge.netBoris Fomitchev
grants Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable,
royalty-free license to use STLport and its documentation
Skia (NA)
68
tinyalsa (NA)
without fee. By downloading, using, or copying STLport
or any portion thereof, Licensee agrees to abide by the
intellectual property laws and all other applicable laws of
the United States of America, and to all of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Licensee shall maintain the
following copyright and permission notices on STLport
sources and its documentation unchanged :Copyright
1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This TV uses tinyalsa: a small library to interface with
ALSA in the Linux kernel The original download site for
this software is : http://github.com/tinyalsaCopyright
2011, The Android Open Source Project Redistribution
and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary
form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution. * Neither the name of The Android Open
Source Project nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY The Android Open
Source Project ``AS IS'' ANDANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL The Android Open Source Project BE
LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAYOUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no
warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own
risk. Permission to use or copy this software for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the
above notices are retained on all copies. Permission to
modify the code and to distribute modified code is
granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a
notice that the code was modified is included with the
above copyright notice. The Licensee may distribute
binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or
modified) without any royalties or restrictions. The
Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport
sources, provided that: The conditions indicated in the
above permission notice are met; The following copyright
notices are retained when present, and conditions
provided in accompanying permission notices are met
:Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright
1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this
software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the above copyright
notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty. Permission to use, copy, modify,
distribute and sell this software and its documentation for
any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics
makes no representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy,
modify, distribute and sell this software and its
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without
fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty
Vorbis Decompression Library (NA)
This TV uses Tremolo ARM-optimized Ogg Vorbis
decompression library. Vorbis is a general purpose audio
and music encoding format contemporary to MPEG-4's
AAC and TwinVQ, the next generation beyond MPEG
audio layer 3The original download site for this software
is : http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremoCopyright (c)
2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.- Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copy right notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation
nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
svox (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
69
The original download site for this software is : http://man
pages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man3/libtomcrypt.3.
htmlThis piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the DO WHAT THE FUCK YOU
WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATIONOR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
AsyncHttpclient (1.4.6)
The original download site for this software is :
http://loopj.com/android-async-http/This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of the
APACHE LICENSE 2.0
Jackson Parser (2.x)
Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string
manipualation. The original download site for this
-software is : https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson
coreThis piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
wpa_supplicant_Daemon (v0.8)
TP Vision Netherlands B.V. is grateful to the groups and
individuals above for their contributions.
Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant
daemonThe original download site for this software is :
http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of GPL version 2.
_________________________________
gson (2.3)
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Gson is a Java library that can be used to convert Java
Objects into their JSON representation. It can also be
used to convert a JSON string to an equivalent Java
object. Gson can work with arbitrary Java objects
-including pre-existing objects that you do not have source
code of. The original download site for this software is :
https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License 2.0
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301,
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies
This software includes an implementation of the AES
Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.gladman.me.uk/This piece of software is
licensed by Brian Gladman
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee
your freedom to share and change free software--to
make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it
to your programs, too.
libUpNp (1.2.1)
The original download site for this software is :
http://upnp.sourceforge.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
BSD.
dnsmasq
Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS
forwarder and DHCP server
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it, that you can change the software or
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know
you can do these things.
The original download site for this software is : https://and
roid.googlesource.com/platform/external/dnmasqThis
piece of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found
below.
TomCrypt (1.1)
iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
70
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and
that users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your
work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to
certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients
all the rights that you have. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you
must show them these terms so they know their rights.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which
is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the
software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients
to know that what they have is not the original, so that
any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors' reputations.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution
of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent
must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed
at all.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the Program with the Program (or with a work based
on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of
this License.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow.
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification
are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted,
and the output from the Program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the
Program). Whether that is true depends on what the
Program does.
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more
than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution
and only if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a
whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way,
to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
71
GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee
your freedom to share and change free software--to
make sure the software is free for all its users.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from
the same place counts as distribution of the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies
to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You
can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public
License is the better strategy to use in any particular
case, based on the explanations below.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish); that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it; that you can change the software and
use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are
informed that you can do these things.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you
to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to
certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of
the library or if you modify it.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients
all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link
other code with the library, you must provide complete
object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so
they know their rights.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the Program specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that
version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
NO WARRANTY
________________________________
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear
that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the
library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the
original version, so that the original author's reputation
will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make sure
that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a
free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a
patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license
obtained for a version of the library must be consistent
with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered
by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This
license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies
to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from
the ordinary General Public License. We use this license
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the
72
verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter,
translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-free programs.
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the
work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically
or using a shared library, the combination of the two is
legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the
original library. The ordinary General Public License
therefore permits such linking only if the entire
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser
General Public License permits more lax criteria for
linking other code with the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification
are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered
only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library
(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
and what the program that uses the Library does.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than
the ordinary General Public License. It also provides
other free software developers Less of an advantage
over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages
are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring
a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special
need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To
achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use
the library. A more frequent case is that a free library
does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In
this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library
to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
?a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
?b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
any change.
?c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in
non-free programs enables a greater number of people to
use a large body of free software. For example,
permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free
programs enables many more people to use the whole
GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the
GNU/Linux operating system.
?d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
or a table of data to be supplied by an application
program that uses the facility, other than as an argument
passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make
a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
application does not supply such function or table, the
facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the
user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a
modified version of the Library.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table
used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the
difference between a "work based on the library" and a
"work that uses the library". The former contains code
derived from the library, whereas the latter must be
combined with the library in order to run.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which
is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
wrote it.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or
data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions
and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library
or work which has been distributed under these terms. A
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the Library or a portion of it, either
73
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2
above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the
Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to
produce a modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use
the modified definitions.)
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution
of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on
the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of
this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General
Public License applies to all subsequent copies and
derivative works made from that copy.
?b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present on
the user's computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library, if the user
-installs one, as long as the modified version is interface
compatible with the version that the work was made with.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the
code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code,
even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
source along with the object code.
?c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the Library),
rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable
is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states
terms for distribution of such executables.
?d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access
to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access
to copy the above specified materials from the same
place.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a
header file that is part of the Library, the object code for
the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is
especially significant if the work can be linked without the
Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for
this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
?e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user a
copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless
that component itself accompanies the executable.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables
containing this object code plus portions of the Library will
still fall under Section 6.)
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do
not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you
may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work
also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked
directly with the Library itself.
?a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities. This must be distributed under the
terms of the Sections above.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a
copy of this License. If the work during execution displays
copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice
for the Library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you
must do one of these things:
?b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined
form of the same work.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the
?a) Accompany the work with the complete
74
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
MIT LICENSE
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through
any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If
the Library specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that
version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
NO WARRANTY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
_______________________________
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
BSD LICENSE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
_____________________________
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
______________________________
75
work
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction,
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of
this document.
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in
Source or Object
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity
authorized by
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and
for which the
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other
modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship.
For the purposes
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity
and all
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include
works that remain
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to
the interfaces of,
control with that entity. For the purposes of this
definition,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to
cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by
contract or
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship,
including
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or
more of the
the original version of the Work and any modifications
or additions
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of
such entity.
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is
intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the
copyright owner
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal
Entity
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to
submit on behalf of
exercising permissions granted by this License.
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this
definition, "submitted"
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for
making modifications,
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written
communication sent
including but not limited to software source code,
documentation
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but
not limited to
source, and configuration files.
communication on electronic mailing lists, source
code control systems,
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from
mechanical
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or
on behalf of, the
transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving
the Work, but
not limited to compiled object code, generated
documentation,
excluding communication that is conspicuously
marked or otherwise
and conversions to other media types.
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in
Source or
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual
or Legal Entity
Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received
by Licensor and
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the
76
or without
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided
that You
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and
conditions of
meet the following conditions:
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual,
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative
Works of,
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and
distribute the
stating that You changed the files; and
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object
form.
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works
and
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and
conditions of
attribution notices from the Source form of the
Work,
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any
part of
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable
the Derivative Works; and
its
(except as stated in this section) patent license to
make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer
the Work,
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of
where such license applies only to those patent
claims licensable
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by
their
include a readable copy of the attribution notices
contained
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s)
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at
least one
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
distributed
a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
the Work
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct
documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or,
if and
institute patent litigation against any entity (including
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent
licenses
within a display generated by the Derivative Works,
granted to You under this License for that Work shall
terminate
wherever such third-party notices normally appear.
The contents
as of the date such litigation is filed.
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes
only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute
copies of the
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute,
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
77
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or
alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the
Work, provided
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions
that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
as modifying the License.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
modifications and
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work
and assume any
may provide additional or different license terms and
conditions
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions
under this License.
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your
modifications, or
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal
theory,
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided
Your use,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate
and grossly
the conditions stated in this License.
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any
Contributor be
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly
state otherwise,
liable to You for damages, including any direct,
indirect, special,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion
in the Work
incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and
conditions of
result of this License or out of the use or inability to
use the
this License, without any additional terms or
conditions.
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
goodwill,
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall
supersede or modify
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or
any and all
the terms of any separate license agreement you may
have executed
other commercial damages or losses), even if such
Contributor
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission
to use the trade
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While
redistributing
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names
of the Licensor,
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may
choose to offer,
except as required for reasonable and customary use
in describing the
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity,
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent
with this
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by
applicable law or
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You
may act only
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility,
not on behalf
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS"
BASIS,
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to
78
limitations under the License.
indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason
_____________________________
of your accepting any such warranty or additional
liability.
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the
file png.h that is
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your
work.
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the
following
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
"[]"
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets
this sentence.
replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't
include
This code is released under the libpng license.
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the
appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also
recommend that a
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1,
February 25, 2010, are
file or class name and description of purpose be
included on the
Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2007 Glenn Randers-Pehrson,
and are
same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license
as libpng-1.2.5
identification within third-party archives.
with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Cosmin Truta
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
"License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 October 3, 2002, are
You may obtain a copy of the License at
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and
are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license
as libpng-1.0.6
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS,
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
Gilles Vollant
See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
79
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
is defined as the following set of individuals:
library or against infringement. There is no warranty
that our
Andreas Dilger
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the
entire
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and
effort is with
the user.
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or
implied,
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March
20, 2000, are
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and
are
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
Group 42, Inc.
distributed according to the same disclaimer and license
as libpng-0.96,
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary,
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Tom Lane
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without
fee, subject
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
to the following restrictions:
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license
as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
be misrepresented as being the original source.
John Bowler
source or altered source distribution.
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically
permit, without
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
Tom Tanner
supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If
you use this
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
80
various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate
to, the
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
FreeType Project.
boxes and the like:
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
which do not fall under their own explicit license. The
license
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied
in the
affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test
programs,
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
Certified Open Source is a
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic,
and IJG
certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
and use of free software in commercial and freeware
products
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
February 25, 2010
o We don't promise that this software works. However,
we will be
_____________________________
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution)
This software is based in part on the work of the
FreeType Team.
o You can use this software for whatever you want, in
parts or
----------------------
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage)
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If
you use
2006-Jan-27
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must
acknowledge
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
somewhere in your documentation that you have
used the
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion
of this
Introduction
software, with or without modifications, in commercial
products.
============
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType
Project and
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive
packages;
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType
font engine,
81
documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file
in its
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form
for a
original, unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive.
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license.
We thus
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is
covered by
encourage you to use the following text:
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
"""
Portions of this software are copyright ?<year> The
FreeType
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by
David Turner,
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as
"""
specified below.
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType
version you
--------------
actually use.
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
Legal Terms
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
===========
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
--------------
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project',
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally
-----------------
distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert
Wilhelm, and
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free,
perpetual and
beta or final release.
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they
named as alpha,
irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform,
compile,
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where
display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute
and
`using' is a generic term including compiling the project's
source
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and
object code
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'.
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose;
and to
This program is referred to as `a program using the
FreeType
authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights
granted
engine'.
herein, subject to the following conditions:
This license applies to all files distributed in the
original
o Redistribution of source code must retain this
license file
FreeType Project, including all source code,
binaries and
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or
82
material, only this license, or another one contracted
with the
changes to
the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it.
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered,
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the
FreeType
original files must be preserved in all copies of
source
Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all
the terms
files.
of this license.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that
-----------
states that the software is based in part of the work
of the
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation.
We also
o freetype@nongnu.org
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web
page in your
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType,
as well as
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
future and wanted additions to the library and
distribution.
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on
If you are looking for support, start in this list if you
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If
you use
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation.
our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee
need be paid
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
to us.
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design
issues,
--------------
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you
shall use
Our home page can be found at
the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or
promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
http://www.freetype.org
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or
more of the
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType
Engine',
_____________________________
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
As you have not signed this license, you are not
required to
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e.
accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is
copyrighted
83
* endorse or promote products derived from this
software without
both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license
apply to the toolkit.
* prior written permission. For written permission,
please contact
*
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both
licenses are BSD-style
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be
called "OpenSSL"
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without
prior written
*
OpenSSL License
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
---------------
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain
the following
*
/*
===========================
acknowledgment:
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
* "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project
*
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without
*
* modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* are met:
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
*
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES;
* the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
*
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use
of this
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
*
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
===========================
*
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL
Project" must not be used to
* This product includes cryptographic software written by
84
conditions
Eric Young
* are met:
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
*/
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
Original SSLeay License
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
-----------------------
* documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use
of this software
*
* All rights reserved.
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
* "This product includes cryptographic software written
by
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines
from the library
*
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial
use as long as
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a
derivative thereof) from
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following
conditions
* the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA,
* "This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG
``AS IS'' AND
* included with this distribution is covered by the same
copyright terms
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any
Copyright notices in
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* the code are not to be removed.
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should
be given attribution
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at
program startup or
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
*
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* modification, are permitted provided that the following
85
* SUCH DAMAGE.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form
other than Source
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically
available version or
Code.
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity
identified
* copied and put under another distribution licence
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines
Covered Code or
_____________________________
portions thereof with code not governed by the terms
of this License.
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
1.8. "License" means this document.
---------------
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to
the maximum
or
extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or
otherwise making the
subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights
conveyed herein.
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or
contributes to
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion
from the
the creation of Modifications.
substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of
the Original
Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a
series of files, a
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and
the Modifications
Modification is:
a file
A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of
made by that particular Contributor.
containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or
Modifications or the
B. Any new file that contains any part of the
Original Code or
combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in
each case
previous Modifications.
including portions thereof.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of
computer software code
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a
mechanism generally
which is described in the Source Code notice required
by Exhibit A as
accepted in the software development community for
the electronic
Original Code, and which, at the time of its release
under this
transfer of data.
86
License is not already Covered Code governed by this
License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free,
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s),
now owned or
non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual
property
hereafter acquired, including without limitation,
method, process,
claims:
and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by
grantor.
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than
patent or
trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use,
reproduce,
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the
Covered Code for
modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute
the Original
making modifications to it, including all modules it
contains, plus
Code (or portions thereof) with or without
Modifications, and/or
any associated interface definition files, scripts used to
control
as part of a Larger Work; and
compilation and installation of an Executable, or
source code
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making,
using or
differential comparisons against either the Original
Code or another
selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use,
practice,
the
well known, available Covered Code of the
Contributor's choice. The
sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of
Source Code can be in a compressed or archival
form, provided the
Original Code (or portions thereof).
appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is
widely available
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and
(b) are
for no charge.
effective on the date Initial Developer first
distributes
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal
entity
Original Code under the terms of this License.
exercising rights under, and complying with all of the
terms of, this
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no
patent license is
License or a future version of this License issued
under Section 6.1.
granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
Original Code; 2)
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which
controls, is
separate from the Original Code; or 3) for
infringements caused
controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of
by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the
this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or
indirect,
combination of the Original Code with other
software or devices.
to cause the direction or management of such entity,
whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than
fifty percent
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each
Contributor
(50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such
- hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non
exclusive license
entity.
87
infringed by Covered Code in the absence of
Modifications made by
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than
patent or
that Contributor.
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use,
reproduce, modify,
display, perform, sublicense and distribute the
Modifications
3.1. Application of License.
created by such Contributor (or portions thereof)
either on an
The Modifications which You create or to which You
contribute are
unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as
Covered Code
governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered
Code may be
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making,
using, or
distributed only under the terms of this License or a
future version
selling of Modifications made by that Contributor
either alone
of this License released under Section 6.1, and You
must include a
and/or in combination with its Contributor Version
(or portions
copy of this License with every copy of the Source
Code You
of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for
sale, have
distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on
any Source Code
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that
version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the
combination of
License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However,
You may include
Modifications made by that Contributor with its
Contributor
an additional document offering the additional rights
described in
Version (or portions of such combination).
Section 3.5.
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and
2.2(b) are
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You
contribute must be
effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of
made available in Source Code form under the terms
of this License
the Covered Code.
either on the same media as an Executable version or
via an accepted
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no
patent license is
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom
you made an
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has
deleted from the
Executable version available; and if made available
via Electronic
Contributor Version; 2) separate from the
Contributor Version;
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at
least twelve (12)
3) for infringements caused by: i) third party
modifications of
months after the date it initially became available, or at
least six
Contributor Version or ii) the combination of
Modifications made
(6) months after a subsequent version of that
particular Modification
by that Contributor with other software (except as
part of the
has been made available to such recipients. You are
responsible for
Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under
Patent Claims
ensuring that the Source Code version remains
88
available even if the
(b) Contributor APIs.
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a
third party.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application
programming
interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent
licenses which
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a
are reasonably necessary to implement that API,
Contributor must
file documenting the changes You made to create that
Covered Code and
also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c)
the date of any change. You must include a prominent
statement that
Representations.
the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from
Original
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed
pursuant to
Code provided by the Initial Developer and including
the name of the
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that
Contributor's
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in
any notice in an
Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s)
and/or
Executable version or related documentation in which
You describe the
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights
conveyed by
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
this License.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
3.5. Required Notices.
(a) Third Party Claims.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file
of the Source
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a
third party's
Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a
particular Source
intellectual property rights is required to exercise
the rights
Code file due to its structure, then You must include
such notice in a
2.2,
location (such as a relevant directory) where a user
would be likely
Code
to look for such a notice. If You created one or more
Modification(s)
granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or
Contributor must include a text file with the Source
distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the
claim and the
You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice
described in
party making the claim in sufficient detail that a
recipient will
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any
documentation
know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such
knowledge after
for the Source Code where You describe recipients'
rights or ownership
the Modification is made available as described in
Section 3.2,
rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to
offer, and to
Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in
all copies
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall
take other steps
obligations to one or more recipients of Covered
Code. However, You
(such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or
newsgroups)
may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf
of the Initial
reasonably calculated to inform those who received
the Covered
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it
absolutely clear than
Code that new knowledge has been obtained.
89
incurred by
any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability
obligation is
the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of
any such
offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial
terms You offer.
Developer and every Contributor for any liability
incurred by the
3.7. Larger Works.
Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of
warranty,
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered
Code with other code
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
not governed by the terms of this License and
distribute the Larger
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
Work as a single product. In such a case, You must
make sure the
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form
only if the
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the
Covered Code.
requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for
that Covered Code,
and if You include a notice stating that the Source
Code version of
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the
terms of this
the Covered Code is available under the terms of this
License,
License with respect to some or all of the Covered
Code due to
including a description of how and where You have
fulfilled the
statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a)
comply with
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be
conspicuously included
the terms of this License to the maximum extent
possible; and (b)
in any notice in an Executable version, related
documentation or
describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such
description
collateral in which You describe recipients' rights
relating to the
must be included in the LEGAL file described in
Section 3.4 and must
Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable
version of Covered
be included with all distributions of the Source Code.
Except to the
Code or ownership rights under a license of Your
choice, which may
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be
contain terms different from this License, provided that
You are in
sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to
be able to
compliance with the terms of this License and that the
license for the
understand it.
Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter
the recipient's
rights in the Source Code version from the rights set
forth in this
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has
License. If You distribute the Executable version
under a different
attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
license You must make it absolutely clear that any
terms which differ
from this License are offered by You alone, not by the
Initial
6.1. New Versions.
Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to
indemnify the
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape")
may publish revised
Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability
and/or new versions of the License from time to time.
90
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
Each version
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
will be given a distinguishing version number.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a
particular version of the
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT,
License, You may always continue to use it under the
terms of that
YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE
version. You may also choose to use such Covered
Code under the terms
COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
of any subsequent version of the License published by
Netscape. No one
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms
applicable to
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder
will terminate
If You create or use a modified version of this License
(which you may
automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein
and fail to cure
only do in order to apply it to code which is not already
Covered Code
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the
breach. All
governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your
license so that
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly
granted shall
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape",
survive any termination of this License. Provisions
which, by their
"MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not
appear in your
nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination
of this License
license (except to note that your license differs from
this License)
shall survive.
and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of
the license
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent
infringement
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public
License and
claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against
Initial Developer
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the
Initial
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor
against whom
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice
described in
You file such action is referred to as "Participant")
alleging that:
Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be
modifications of
this License.)
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or
indirectly
infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by
such
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of
this License
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate
prospectively,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE
91
8.2 above,
unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You
either: (i)
all end user license agreements (excluding distributors
and resellers)
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable
which have been validly granted by You or any
distributor hereunder
royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications
made by such
prior to termination shall survive termination.
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with
respect to
the Contributor Version against such Participant. If
within 60 days
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment
arrangement are not
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the
litigation claim
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,
is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to
You under
OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the
expiration of
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
the 60 day notice period specified above.
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than
such Participant's
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any
patent, then
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF
SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
any rights granted to You by such Participant under
Sections 2.1(b)
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You
first made, used,
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR
DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by
that
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE
TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
Participant.
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against
Participant
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is
resolved (such as
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that
term is defined in
infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of
the licenses
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer
granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2
shall be taken
software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such
into account in determining the amount or value of any
payment or
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48
license.
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4 (June 1995),
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or
92
work with Initial Developer and Contributors to
distribute such
all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered
Code with only those
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is
intended or
rights set forth herein.
shall be deemed to constitute any admission of
liability.
This License represents the complete agreement
concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held
to be
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as
unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only
to the extent
"Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that
the Initial
necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall
be governed by
Developer permits you to utilize portions of the
Covered Code under
California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if
any, specified
A.
any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law
provisions.
by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit
With respect to disputes in which at least one party is
a citizen of,
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
or an entity chartered or registered to do business in
the United
States of America, any litigation relating to this
License shall be
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the
Northern
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file
except in
District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara
County,
compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy
of the License at
California, with the losing party responsible for costs,
including
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and
Software distributed under the License is distributed
on an "AS IS"
expenses. The application of the United Nations
Convention on
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is
expressly excluded.
License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations
under the License.
Any law or regulation which provides that the
language of a contract
The Original Code is _________.
shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply
to this
License.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ______.
Portions created by _______ are Copyright (C)
______. All Rights Reserved.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors,
each party is
Contributor(s): __________.
responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or
indirectly,
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
out of its utilization of rights under this License and
You agree to
93
under the terms
of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in which
case the
provisions of [______] License are applicable instead
of those
above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this
file only
under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow
others to use
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your
decision by
deleting the provisions above and replace them with
the notice and
other provisions required by the [___] License. If you
do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your version
of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly
from the text of
the notices in the Source Code files of the Original
Code. You should
use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found
in the
Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
21.6
‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘّﻲ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
…‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬
.OK ‫ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬، ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬1 .‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ < ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ‬2 .‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬،‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‬3 .‫ )ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬4 -
94
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ( ﻭﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜّﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ) ‪).IEC 62087 Ed.2‬‬
‫‪22.1‬‬
‫‪22.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:Android‬‬
‫‪Android Lollipop 5.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪22.4‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ 75 :‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ) ‪)IEC75‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪ Hyperband :‬؛ ‪ S-Channel‬؛ ‪ UHF‬؛ ‪VHF‬‬
‫• ‪DVB-T2 :DVB‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ‪PAL ، SECAM :‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪IEC 13818-2 /ISO (HD /MPEG2 SD :‬‬
‫‪)IEC 14496-10 /ISO (HD /MPEG4 SD )،‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ) ‪)IEC 13818-3 /ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻟﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬
‫‪EU 2012/19/‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪22.5‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ 108 : PUT6801 • 43‬ﺳﻢ ‪ 43 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ 123 : PUT6801 • 49‬ﺳﻢ ‪ 49 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ 139 : PUT6801 • 55‬ﺳﻢ ‪ 55 /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪p 2160 x • 3840‬‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪22.6‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ‪ ،EC /2006/66‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ — ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫‪ 60 - i • 480‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60 - p • 480‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 - i • 576‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 - p • 576‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 - p • 720‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 - i • 1080‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 60 ,‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 24 - p • 1080‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 25 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 30 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 24 - p • 2160‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 25 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 30 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪22.2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 480 × 640‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 600 × 800‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1024‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1280‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 765 × 1360‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 768 × 1360‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 1024 × 1280‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ‪ 60 - p 1080 × 1920‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪support /www.philips.com‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ 110-240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 10-/+‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 35‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫• ‪) 3.0 USB USB 3 -‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ -‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫• ‪ 24 - p 2160 × 3840‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 25 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 30 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 60 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪22.7‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪DVI‬‬
‫( ‪ -‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‬
‫• ‪ ،Y Pb Pr : YPbPr‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪HDCP 2.2 - HDMI 1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ARC - HDMI 2‬‬
‫• ‪USB 1 - USB 2.0‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪Toslink‬‬
‫• ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪RJ45 - LAN‬‬
‫• ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪PUT6801 43‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 968,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 576,87‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 87,75‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪8,8 ±‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 968,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 628,16‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 258,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪9,1 ±‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪PUT6801 49‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1099,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 646,43‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 89,54‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±‬‬
‫‪ 10,78‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1099,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 697,74‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 259,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±‬‬
‫‪ 11,1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪PUT6801 55‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1239,2‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 711,6‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 90,74‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪14,78 ±‬‬
‫ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1239,2‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 777,43‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ ‪ 259,18‬ﻣﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ‪±‬‬
‫‪ 15,1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪22.10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ‪wOOx‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪HD‬‬
‫• ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ) ‪ 20 :(RMS‬ﻭﺍﻁ‬
‫• ‪® Dolby Digital Plus‬‬
‫• ‪™Digital Out +DTS 2.0‬‬
‫‪22.11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫• ‪USB 3.0 / USB 2.0‬‬
‫• ‪Ethernet LAN RJ-45‬‬
‫• ‪)ac /n /g /b /Wi-Fi 802.11a‬ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ(‬
‫• ‪ BT2.1‬ﻣﻊ ‪ BT4.0 EDR‬ﻣﻊ ‪BLE‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫• ‪NTFS ،،FAT 32 ، FAT 16‬‬
‫‪22.8‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ‪HDMI 3 in - ARC‬‬
‫• ‪HDMI 4 in - MHL - ARC‬‬
‫• ‪USB 2.0 - USB 2‬‬
‫• ‪) 3.0 USB - USB 3‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪CAM +/CI :‬‬
‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ -‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪MPEG-TS ،MPEG-PS ،AVI ،AVCHD ،GP 3 :‬‬
‫‪M4V ،MOV (Quicktime )،MKV (Matroska ،MPEG-4 ،‬‬
‫‪)WMA /WMV /ASF (Windows Media )،M4A ،‬‬
‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪MPEG-4 Part ,MPEG-2 ,MPEG-1 :‬‬
‫‪VC-1 ),HEVC (H.265 ),H264 (MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC ,2‬‬
‫‪WMV9 ,‬‬
‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪v2 /v1 ) HE-AAC ، AAC :‬‬
‫(‪DTS ،Dolby Digital Plus ، Dolby Digital ، AMR-NB ،‬‬
‫‪III /II /Layer I /2/2.5MPEG-1 ،™ Premium Sound‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ‪ v2 )WMA ،( MP3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪)v10 /v9 (WMA Pro ،(v9.2‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪SUB (SubViewer )،SRT (SubRip ،SAMI :‬‬
‫‪)TXT (TMPlayer )،TXT (mplayer2 )،TXT (MicroDVD )،‬‬
‫– ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،UTF-8 :‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ) ‪)، Windows-1250‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ) ‪ ،(Windows-1251‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ ) ‪ ،(Windows-1253‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ )‬
‫‪ ،(Windows-1254‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺑﻴﺔ ) ‪)Windows-1252‬‬
‫• ﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪BMP PNG JPEG :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ‪H.264 (MPEG-4 AVC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ًﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ) ‪High Profile‬‬
‫@ ‪.L5.1‬‬
‫– ﻳُﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ ( HEVC (H.265‬ﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Main 10 Profile /Main‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Level 5.1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ DVI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ - (HDMI‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫• ‪ : SCART‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪RGB ، CVBS‬‬
‫• ‪ ،Y Pb Pr : YPbPr‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪HDCP 2.2 - HDMI 1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪HDCP 2.2 - HDMI 2‬‬
‫• ‪USB 1 - USB 2.0‬‬
‫• ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪Toslink‬‬
‫• ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪RJ45 - LAN‬‬
‫• ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪22.9‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ‪HDMI 3 in - ARC‬‬
‫• ‪HDMI 4 in - MHL - ARC‬‬
‫• ‪USB 2.0 - USB 2‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫– ‪ VC-1‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.L3 @Advanced Profile‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ) ‪(DMS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧّﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪DLNA V1.5‬‬
‫)ﻓﺌﺔ ‪).DMS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪iOS ) Philips TV Remote App‬‬
‫‪ ( Android‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺟّﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ‪LED‬ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺤﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻨًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪23.1‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺠّﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺋﺰ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻄﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻣﻦ ‪Philips‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮًﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪welcome /www.philips.com‬‬
‫‪23.2‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.Philips‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.HOME ‬‬‫‪2 -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻜﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪DVB-T‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﻧﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳّﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪PDF‬ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪support /www.philips.com‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪23.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳؤﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﺪّﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺩﺍءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ & ‪;quot‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ& ‪;.quot‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Dect‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪n /g /Wi-Fi 802.11b‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (ac 802.11‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺷﻘﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺒّﺊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ‪.SSID‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻄﻴء‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ( ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﺣﺪًّﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤؤﺛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪DHCP‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) DHCP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴّﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DHCP‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﻜّﻨًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪)PCM‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻀﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪USB‬ﻭ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺑﻖِ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﺸﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃّﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮَﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤ‪.‬ﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI 2‬ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮّﻫَﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻣﺸﻮﺷًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ HDMI Ultra HD‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪.Ultra HD‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ، DVI‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪)AUDIO IN‬ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪HDMI EasyLink‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪ . HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪EasyLink‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬّﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪HDMI-CEC‬ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) ‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ(‪.‬‬‫ ‪4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬‫ ‪5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BACK ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪23.4‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،Philips‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪. support /www.philips.com‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺩﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻭﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻭﻃﺮﺡ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪23.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪ support /www.philips.com‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳؤﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺛﺎﺙ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪24.1‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ !‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﻬﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮّﺽ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Philips‬ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮّﺽ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺃﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺩَ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻮﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗؤﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 41‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 25‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 55‬ﺭﻃﻼً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭّﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢٍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮٍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤّﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤّﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP Vision‬ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥّ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮّﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ!‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪24.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻴء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺑﻬﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺨﻔﻒ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫‪25.2‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪Philips‬‬
‫‪25.1‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫© ‪. TP Vision Europe B.V 2016‬ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪TP Vision Europe B.V‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ‪، TP Vision‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺰﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ‪Philips Shield Emblem Philips‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Koninklijke Philips‬‬
‫‪.N.V‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺗُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Koninklijke Philips N.V‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪TP‬‬
‫‪Vision‬ﺑﺤﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴّﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ support /www.philips.com‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻼﺣﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻼءﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ‪ Philips‬ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺸﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪Philips‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ!‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Philips‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪ support /www.philips.com‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮّﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪LED /LCD‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪﺩٍ ﻛﺒﻴﺮٍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ 99,999%‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥّ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞٍ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﱟ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ( ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻄﻞٍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗؤﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﻮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗؤﻛﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﻨًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺗؤﺩﻱ ‪ TP Vision‬ﺩﻭﺭًﺍ ﺣﻴﻮﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜّﻦ ‪TP Vision‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻄﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﻜﺮًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫‪26.4‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital Plus‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Dolby . Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟـ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫‪26.1‬‬
‫‪MHL‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Mobile High-Definition Link MHL‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ MHL‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.LLC ,MHL‬‬
‫‪26.5‬‬
‫™ ‪DTS Premium Sound‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ، DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ . patents.dts.com ://http‬ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪ . DTS Licensing Limited‬ﺇﻥ ‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ‬
‫‪DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ DTS Premium Sound‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Inc ,DTS . ©Inc ,DTS‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪26.2‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪HD Ultra‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DIGITALEUROPE UHD Display‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.DIGITALEUROPE‬‬
‫‪26.6‬‬
‫‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪26.3‬‬
‫‪Windows Media‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows Media‬ﺇﻣّﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Microsoft‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘّﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥّ ‪HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺔ ﻟـ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﻴﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft PlayReady‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪Microsoft‬‬
‫‪ PlayReady‬ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﻢ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ™‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ PlayReady‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ PlayReady‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ . WMDRM‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒّﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﻦ ﻗِﺒﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺈﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ . PlayReady‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳؤﺛﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ‪PlayReady‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻓﻀﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪26.7‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫‪ ،® Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ، Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫‪26.8‬‬
‫‪Kensington‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﻀﺎﺀ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ Micro Saver Kensington‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠّﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ACCO World‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠّﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪26.9‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓّﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓّﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪TP Vision‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴؤﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪9 APP،‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪23 Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ‪23 Bluetooth،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪24 Bluetooth،‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪23 Bluetooth،‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ‪29 DMR،‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪20 EasyLink‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪19 HDMI MHL‬‬
‫‪ Ultra HD‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪46 HDMI‬‬
‫‪19 HDMI، ARC‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪42 Natural Motion‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪58 TV on Demand‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪41 Ultra Resolution‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪58‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪34‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪26‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪26‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫‪ 26‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪9‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺢ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪NAS‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﻲ ‪50‬‬
‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪44‬‬
‫ﻣؤﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪48‬‬
‫‪ 34‬ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪Play Google‬‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ 26‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪43‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ‪41‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪30‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪15‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪42‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪39‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪95‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪13‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺦ ‪13‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪13‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪24‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪11‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪41‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪28 Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪103‬‬
‫ﺇ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣؤﻗﺘًﺎ ‪55‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪101‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪42‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Android‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ ‪44‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪99‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪98‬‬
‫‪ 99‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ 99‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪98‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ‪94‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪APP ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪58‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪95‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪29‬‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫‪ 29‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪Screen Smart Fi-Wi ،‬‬
‫‪ 28‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ WPS ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪30‬‬
‫‪ 29‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Fi-Wi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪101‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪52‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﺘﻴﻜﺴﺖ ‪17‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪42‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪6‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪DVI-HDMI‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪ ،YPbPr‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪28‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪62‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪8‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫‪ 42‬ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪Motion Natural ،‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫‪ 41‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪19‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺫ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪25‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻤّﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫‪ 29‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ IP ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ 29‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪WoWLAN ،‬‬
‫‪ 28‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪WPS ،‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪29‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪31‬‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ ،Philips‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ‪48‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪43‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪48‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ‪49‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ‪48‬‬
‫‪108‬‬
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
109
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertising